2G Huawei NSN parameter mapping.xls

Parameters Table Recommended value Default

Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900&DCS1800

MCC Cell_Common 470 None

MNC Cell_Common 02 None

NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0

BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0

GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS not support GPRS

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No

Cellband Cell_Common 0 0

RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan

FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Cell_Common 63 62

Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None

UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1

Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes

DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes

TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site 65535

TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site 255

Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site None

Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site 65535

Active State TRx Activated Activated

Receive Mode TRx None

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63 62

Depends on BTS/site configuration

DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes

Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 8

Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close

No (tunable based on performance)

Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 3



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 30

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 22

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 As per plan

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 1



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 As per frequency plan

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 12

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52

MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 4 Times

N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 64

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 85

T3105(10ms) HO 7 7

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. HO 30 30

ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65

UL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60

DL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60

MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No

Inter-System Handover Enable HO No No

PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No

Load HO Allowed HO Yes No

SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No

PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0

TO Idle_Mode 0 0

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0 No

PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes

CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60(should same for same LAC) 20

BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1 2

NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255 11111111

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0 No

ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes

T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10

T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000







Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85 85






Filter Length for DL Qual. Power_Control 5 5

Filter Length for UL Qual. Power_Control 4 5

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 5

DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3

DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35

UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3

UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30

PC Interval Power_Control 3 3

Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15

PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1

PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec

GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB

T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms

T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms

Description

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460.

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv

This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed.GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.DCS1800: The cell

This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area.Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.For example, value 0 indic

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value

This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120

This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi

This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory.

Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047

This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity.

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout.


This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.


This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.

This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.

This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
























This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value.Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.

This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.



This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.

This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408.This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell reselection. 1: barred0: allowedTogether with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority0 0 Normal Normal0 1 Barred Barred1 0 Low Normal1 1 Low Normal

Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.

This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.

This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.

This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.

This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH.This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.

This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority0 0 Normal Normal0 1 Barred Barred1 0 Low Normal1 1 Low Normal

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.

This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires.

This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.

The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.

After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.

In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message.

This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.





This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%



This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover.

This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12.Value 1 indicates one PRACH.Value 2 indicates two PRACHs....Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.

This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4.Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell.

When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block.When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time.If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds immediately.If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the dedicated mode.

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message.This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network.If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed.

Configuration Policy NSN PARAMETER

Name Parameter Name Unit

BAND frequency band in use

NoneMCC mobile country code

None MNC mobile network code

This parameter should be set as required.

NCC BSIC NCC

BCC bsIdentityCode

None

GENA GPRSenabled

None

EGENA egprsEnabled

None

BAND frequency band in use

None

RAC routing area code

None

HOP HoppingMode

DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup TA

None


None

AHOP

DTX dtxMode

1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon

The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink

RE callReestablishmentAllowed

RXP rxLevAccessMin dBm

None

DR drInUse

None

DYNAMIC_SDCCH

NonePENA powerCtrlEnabled

None TRX_ID TRX ID

None

TRX_NUM

None

CI CellId

NoneBTS_ID BTS ID

STATE Administrative State

None

RDIV diversityUsed


The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment

If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated.Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to Not Activated.


DOWNLINK DTX

None

DR drInUse

RXP rxLevAccessMin dBm

RE callReestablishmentAllowed

DTX dtxMode

None

HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.

The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved.

None

None

TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc

None

HRH3 0.5dB

None

HRH2 0.5dB

None

HRH1 0.5dB

None

HRTD3

None

HRTD2

None

HRTD1

FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3



G136

amitsver: Feature

None

HRH3

None

HRH2

None

HRH1

None

HRTU3

None

HRTU2

None

HRTU1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTD3

None

FRTD2

None

FRTD1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTU3

None

FRTU2

None

FRTU1

RLT radioLinkTimeout SACCH

RET maxNumberRetransmission

None

T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200

AHRLT

AMR HR Radio Link Timeout

ARLT

AMR Radio Link Timeout

DRT drThreshold dBm

If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.

This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1.

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells.

T3105

NY1 maxNumberOfRepetitions

QURH

amrHoHrThrUlRxQual

QDRH

amrHoHrThrDlRxQual

QURF

amrHoFrThrUlRxQual

QDRF

amrHoFrThrDlRxQual

QUR hoThresholdsQualUL

QDR hoThresholdsQualDL

POPT msPwrOptLev dBm

The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value of this parameter is 70 ms.

The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

None

ISHO

EPB enablePwrBudgetHandover

FMT fastMovingThreshold SACCH

TRHO trhoTargetLevel dBm

ESD enableSDCCHHandover

None

PET penaltyTime sec

None

TEO temporaryOffset dB

The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.

QUA cellBarQualify

Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference.

It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.

PI cellReselectParamInd

HYS cellReselectHysteresis dB

PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS hours

The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions:Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in the system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s.A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.

An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes.

It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic.

To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC.In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period.When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell.When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on.In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells.

MFR

None

AG noOfBlocksForAccessGrant

PLMN plmnPermitted

BAR cellBarred

None

ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach

T3122

T3111

T3109

The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance.

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging

The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops.

The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be set to 0. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.


T8

T3121

T3107

T7

T3101

None

BO5 interferenceAveragingProcess dBm

None


If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.


If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate.


If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.

None


None


None


None


QDS SACCH

QUS SACCH

LDS SACCH

LUS SACCH

LDR

UDR

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.

pcAveragingQualDL / windows size

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.

pcAveragingQualUL / windows size

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.

pcAveragingLevDL / windows size

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.

pcAveragingLevUL / windows size

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual


PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

LDR

UDR

LUR

UUR

LUR

UUR

INT powerControlInterval sec

NoneSL rxLevMinCell dBm

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.

PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level


PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded.

PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.

PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access.

PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources.

None

PRB bsPRACHBlocks

None

PBB bsPBCCHBlocks

GPET gprsPenaltyTime sec

None

GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset dB

T3192

T3168

If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but occupied for a long time.If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period.If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF, thus shortening the TBF establishment time.On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data.On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate.

If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources.If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases.

Step Size Default Value Range

GSM 900 (0)

3 characters

2...3 characters

1 0...7

0…7

N NoYes

N Y/N

GSM 900 (0)

255 0…255

No No/BB/RF

255 0...255

255

2 0...2

GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)

Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment, otherwise read from RNW db.

GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)

N Yes/No

-105 -110...-47

N Yes/No

Y Yes/No

1 1...16

F

- 1…65535

1...10 characters

Locked (3)

N Y/N

255 0...255

N Yes/No

-105 -110...-47

N Yes/No

2 0...2

0 0...63/N

0 0...2

0 0…15

2 0…15

2 0…15

4 20 4...64

4 1, 2, 4 or 7

-100 -110…-47

5 5...35

4 0...7

4 0...7

N -110... -47/ N

Yes Yes/No

0 0...255

N -109... -47/ N

N Yes/No

20 20 20...640

10 0 0...70

N Y/N

N Y/N

4 0...14

0.5 0 / 0.1...25.5

4 2...9

1 0...7

NCC 0…7

N Yes/No

Y Yes/No

-47 -47…FIXED

-90 -110...-47

-95 -110...-47

-100 -110...-47

-105 -110...-47

-110 -110…FIXED

1 1...32

1 1...32

4 1...32

4 1...32

2 0...31

-100 -110...-47

6 0…12

3 1…4

10s 10 10…320

0 0…70

Parameter Name Old Value Remarks Unit

UL DTX Shall Use Shall UseCall Reestablishment Forbidden NA Yes None

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 0 1

TCH Immediate Assignment No NoDirect Retry Yes YesUL PC Allowed No Yes NoneDL PC Allowed No Yes None

Encryption Algorithm NA None

DL DTX NA No None

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) 63 Bit Period

NA NO

Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment NA NOATT Yes Yes

NA

Cell_Bar_Access NA 0NCC Permitted NA 255BS_AG_BLKS_RES NA 1

BS-PA-MFRAMS

NA 40

CRH 6dB 6dBPI Yes YesCell_Bar_Qualify 0 0CRO(2dB) 0 0ACS No NoTO 0 0PT(s) NA 0

24 24

RACH Busy Threshold 5 16

Paging Times 1 1

Proposed Value

Not matched with other vendor

<10000000>

Tunable based on performance

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier

Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame,4.615ms))

20 (32 Satelite Cells)

4 Multiframe Period

4 Multiframe Period

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

Ericsson 60

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))

Need to standerdize

To identify MS request at -94 dBm or worst coverage


Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA

Speech Version NA 47

TRX Aiding Function Control NA None

Random Access Error Threshold NA 200RACH Min.Access Level 0 1T200 SDCCH(5ms) 60 60T200 FACCH/F(5ms) 50 50T200 FACCH/H(5ms) 50 50T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) 150 150T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) 200 200T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) 60 60T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) 60 60Use LAPDm N200 No NoN200 of Establish 5 5N200 of Release 5 5N200 of SACCH 5 5N200 of SDCCH 23 23N200 of FACCH/Half rate 29 29N200 of FACCH/Full rate 34 34

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter No No

NA 4

Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 2

MS MAX Retrans

Common Access Control Class

Special Access Control Class

Emergent Call Disable NA No

20 24

ECSC Yes Yes

MBR

Power Deviation Indication Yes YesPower Deviation(2dB) 1 1

Need to discuss with Huawei

Allowed & Recover When Check Res.

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms)

If use Imm_Ass Retrans, Default

4 (7 for Satelite Site)

4 (7 for Satelite Site)

Not selected

Not selected

Not selected

Not selected

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

All vendor same platform

0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell)

0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell)

Serving Band Reporting NA NA

Qsearch I NA NA

Qsearch C Initial NA NA

FDD Q Offset NA NA

FDD REP QUANT NA NA

FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA

FDD Qmin NA NA

Qsearch P NA NA

3G Search PRIO NA NA

Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA

Scale Order NA NA

Qsearch C NA NA

900 Reporting Offset NA NA

900 Reporting Threshold NA NA

1800 Reporting Offset NA NA

1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA

FDD Reporting Offset NA NA

FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

Allow Reassign No No

Allow EMLPP No NoImmediate Assignment Opt. NA NOShort Message Uplink Disabled No NoShort Message Downlink Disabled No No

Frequency Band of Reassign No

Max Assignment Retry Times NA 2AMR ACS(F) NA 165AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) NA 18AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) NA 26AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) NA 3AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) NA 3AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) NA 18AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) NA 26AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) NA 3AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) NA 3AMR Starting Mode(F) NA 1AMR ACS(H) NA 15AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) NA 18AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) NA 26AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) NA 3AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) NA 3AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) NA 18AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) NA 26AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) NA 3AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) NA 3AMR Starting Mode(H) NA 0Co-BSC/MSC Adj No NoSDCCH HO Allowed No NoIntracell HO Allowed Yes Yes None

Load HO Allowed No Yes None

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed No No NoneRx_Level_Drop HO Allowed No No NonePBGT HO Allowed Yes YesLevel HO Allowed NA NOFringe HO Allowed NA YesBQ HO Allowed NA YesTA HO Allowed NA Yes


Same Band



Concentric Circles HO Allowed NA

Interference HO Allowed NA YesEdge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold 5 15 GradeEdge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold 10 20 GradeEdge HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 SecondEdge HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 SecondLayer HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 SecondLayer HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 SecondPBGT Watch Time(s) 5 5 SecondPBGT Valid Time(s) 4 4 SecondInter-layer HO Threshold NA 25

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis 3 3 dB

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell 15 10 Grade

Intracell F-H HO Allowed NA YesIntracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) NA 5 SecondIntracell F-H HO Last Time(s) NA 4 SecondF2H HO th NA 30H2F HO th NA 10Min Interval for TCH HOs NA 4Min Interval for SDCCH HOs NA 2Min Interval for Consecutive HOs 6 6 SecondMin Interval for Emerg.HOs NA 2Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed NA NOPenalty Allowed Yes Yes NoneMS Power Prediction after HO No NoMR.Preprocessing NA YesTransfer Original MR NA NOTransfer BS/MS Power Class Yes Yes None

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR NA

Allowed M.R Number Lost NA 4

Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6

Filter Length for TCH Qual NA 6Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 NoneFilter Length for SDCCH Qual NA 3

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV 6 6

Filter Length for TA 6 6

Penalty Level after HO Fail NA 30Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) NA 10Penalty Level after BQ HO NA 30 dBPenalty Time after BQ HO(s) NA 10Penalty Level after TA HO NA 63 dBPenalty Time after TA HO(s) NA 10

Yes (for MB cell), No for othres



Once Every Second

Number of MR

Number of MR

Number of MR

Number of MR

NA 30

TA Threshold NA 255DL Qual. Threshold NA 50UL Qual. Threshold NA 50UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 30DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 35Filter Parameter A1 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A2 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A3 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A4 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A5 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A6 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A7 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter A8 10 10 NoneFilter Parameter B 0 0 NoneNo Dl Mr.HO Allowed NA YesNo Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit NA 60Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit NA 8System Flux Threshold for Load HO NA 10Load HO Threshold NA 5Load Req.on Candidate Cell NA 2Load HO Bandwidth NA 25 dBLoad HO Step Period 5 10 SecondLoad HO Step Level 5 5 dBMS Fast-moving Watch Cells NA NA NoneMS Fast-moving Valid Cells NA NA NoneMS Fast-moving Time Threshold NA 15MAX Consecutive HO Times NA 3 TimesForbidden time after MAX Times 20 20 SecondInterval for Consecutive HO Jud. 6 6 SecondPenalty on MS Fast Moving HO NA 30 dBPenalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) NA 40UL Expected Level at HO Access 35 35 Grade

K Bias NA 0

UL to OL HO Allowed Yes Yes NoneOL to UL HO Allowed Yes Yes NoneRX_LEV for UO HO Allowed NA Yes NoneRX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NA Yes NoneTA for UO HO Allowed NA No NoneUO Signal Intensity Difference NA 0 NoneRX_LEV Threshold NA 40 NoneRX_LEV Hysteresis NA NA dBRX_QUAL Threshold NA 50 NoneTA Threshold NA 63 Bit PeriodTA Hysteresis 0 0 Bit PeriodUO HO Watch Time(s) NA 5 SecondUO HO Valid Time(s) NA 4 Second

Assign Optimum Layer None

Assign-optimum-level Threshold NA 35 dBm

Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)


System optimization

System optimization

TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. NA 63 Bit PeriodTA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed NA No NoneTA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. NA 0 Bit Period

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC None

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer None

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold NA 20 GradeUtoO HO Received Level Threshold NA 35 GradeUtoO Traffic HO Allowed NA Yes None

Traffic Threshold of Underlay NA

Underlay HO Step Period(s) NA 5 SecondUnderlay HO Step Level NA 5 NonePenalty Time of UtoO HO(s) NA 5 SecondPenalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) NA 30 SecondPenalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) NA 5 SecondMaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail NA 3 None

Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed NA NA

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA

Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA

NA NA

NA NA

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA

3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA

Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA

Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA

System optimization

System optimization

Underlaid subcell

Underlaid subcell


3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

3G Parameter

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT NA NA

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. NA 30 NoneT3105(10ms) NA 7 10 msPC Interval NA NAUL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 GradeUL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 GradeUL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 GradeUL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 GradeDL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 GradeDL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 GradeDL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 GradeDL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA NA

Filter Length for UL Qual. NA 4

Filter Length for DL Qual. NA NAMR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None

UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1

DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 NA 6 dBMAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1 NA 4 dBMAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 NA 2 dBMAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 6 dBMAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV NA 16 dBMAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 dBUL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 NoneUL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dBDL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 NoneDL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dBBTS PC Class NA 16 GradeAMR PC Interval NA 3 None

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA 4

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual NA 4

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. NA 4

AMR MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 GradeAMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 GradeAMR ULQual. Upper Threshold NA 0 GradeAMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

3G Parameter

3G Parameter

SACCH Period

SACCH Period

Number of MR

Number of MR

SACCH Period

SACCH Period

SACCH Period

SACCH Period

MR Number

MR Number

AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 GradeAMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 GradeAMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 GradeAMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

NA 6 dB

NA 4 dB

NA 2 dB

NA 6 dB

NA 16 dB

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 Grade

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dBAMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 NoneAMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dBAMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 NoneAMR BTS PC Class NA 16 dBIdle SDCCH Threshold N1 NA 2 NoneCell SDCCH Channel Maximum 80 80 NoneTCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) 60 60 SecondEnhanced TCH Adjust Allowed NA Yes None

Idle TCH Threshold N1 NA

Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) NA 1 Minute

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) NA 50

Interf. Priority Allowed Yes Yes NoneActive CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Yes Yes NoneAllocation TRX Priority Allowed Yes Yes NoneHistory Record Priority Allowed Yes Yes NoneBalance Traffic Allowed Yes Yes NoneInterf.of UL Level Threshold NA 30 GradeInterf.of UL Qual. Threshold NA 50 GradeInterf.of DL Level Threshold NA 25 GradeInterf.of DL Qual.Threshold NA 50 Grade

Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6

Filter Length for TCH Qual. 6 6

Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 NoneFilter Length for SDCCH Qual. 2 2 NoneUpdata Period of CH Record(min) NA 30 MinuteUpdata Freq.of CH Record NA 2 NoneAMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA Yes

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA 2

TCH req suspend interval(s) NA 60 Second

NA Yes

NA 30

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0



AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV


Percentage

Number of MR

Number of MR

Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell

NA 30

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA

Data service Allowed NA None

SMCBC DRX NA Yes NoneCell Load0 Threshold NA 20Cell Load1 Threshold NA 40Cell Load2 Threshold NA 55Cell Load3 Threshold NA 70Cell Load4 Threshold NA 80Cell Load5 Threshold NA 90Cell Load Change Delay NA 3

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold NA

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) NA 110Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) NA 105Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) NA 98Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) NA 92Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) NA 87Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) NA 85

NA 20

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) NA

Frame Start Time NA 65535DC Bias Voltage Threshold NA 3Power Output Error Threshold NA 2Power Output Reduction Threshold NA 2VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold NA 2VSWR TRX Error Threshold NA 2Radio Resource Report Period(s) NA 10 SecondCCCH Load Indication Period(s) NA 15CCCH Load Threshold NA 80Overload Indication Period 15 15

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA 5000

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA 360Included Angle(Degree) NA 360

PWRC Yes

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell


<0110111000>


Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))


Not selected

Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHopping

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

Support Half Rate NA YesAbis Flow Control Permitted Yes YesAiding Delay Protect Time(min) NA 15 SecondDirectly Magnifier Site Flag NA No None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Release Indication NA 1 None

NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Equipment Failure NA 1 None

NA 1 None

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Resource Check NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

NA 1 None

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch NA Yes NoneT3101(ms) NA 3000 msImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) NA 5000 msT3103A(ms) NA 10000 msT3103C(ms) NA 10000 msT7(ms) NA 10000 msT3107(ms) NA 10000 msT3121(ms) NA 10000 msT8(ms) NA 10000 msT3109(ms) NA 27000 msT3111(ms) NA 1000 msTREESTABLISH(ms) NA 15000 msT3122(s) NA 10 ms

5 (900), 0 (1800)

5 (900), 0 (1800)

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)

Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response)

Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other)

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure

Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout

Parameters Table Recommended Value Default

Multiband

Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800

Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked

Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3

MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None

MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None

NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0

BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0

Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1

Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated

PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255

GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS

Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No

Single band 900MHz

Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously

Cell_Common 0 0 0

Support NACC Cell_Common No No No

Cell_Common No No No

Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No


Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support

Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0

RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan

Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support

Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support

Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1

FH MODE Cell_Common

DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

Cell_Common 62 62 62

8PSK power attenuation grade

Support PACKET SI STATUS

PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells

Support Enhanced DTM

As per frequency plan



MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None

Cell_Common No Yes Yes

Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell

Cell_Common NONE NONE NONE

Cell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None

UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use


RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1


Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes


UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

Enhanced Concentric Allowed

Attributes of UL And OL Subcells

BCCH Concentric Attribute

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

TCH Immediate Assignment

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed



TRX Index TRx 65535

TRX No. TRx 255

Cell Index TRx None

Site Index TRx 65535

Board Type TRx None

Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated

Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto

Cabinet No. TRx 0

Subrack No. TRx 0

Slot No. TRx None

TEI TRx 0

Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx 0


Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment

Depend on invidual site




















Out-BSC Slot No. TRx None

Out-BSC Port No. TRx None

TRx 255

RSL In Site Port No. TRx 255

TRx 255

RSL Logic No. TRx 2048

Hop Type TRx None

Power Level TRx 0 0 0

Power Type TRx Default

TRx None

TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0

Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable

TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No

TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0





Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K)





RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)







Depends on BTS/site

configuration

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

HW_Concentric Attribute

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

TRx No No No

TRx 100 100 100

TRx 100 100 100

TRx 50 50 50

TRx 48 48 48

TRx Yes Yes Yes

TRx 12 12 12

TRx 8 8 8

TRx 22 22 22

TRx 8 8 8

TRx 30 30 30

TRx 80 80 80

Receive Mode TRx None

Send Mode TRx None

Wireless Link Alarm Flag

Abnormal Release Statistic Base

Abnormal Warn Threshold

Abnormal Release Threshold

Statical Period of No-traffic(5min)

Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit

WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min)

Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour)

End Time of WLA Detection(hour)

Up Down Balance Basic Difference

Up Down Balance Floating Range

Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

Depends on BTS/site

configuration

TRx Yes Yes No

TRx No No No

Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default

TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None

TRx 255 255 255

TRx 255 255 255

TRx 255 255 255

TRx 255 255 255

TRx 255 255 255

TRx TDM TDM TDM

TRx 8 8 8

MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32

TRx 255 255 255

InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535

Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier

Antenna Hopping Index

Reverse Out-BSC Slot No.

Reverse Out-BSC Port No.

Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K)

Reverse RSL In Site Port No.

Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)

Transmission Type of Abis Interface

Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier

Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT)

HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535

TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255

XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0

TRX Ability TRx 1 1

PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1

Priority TRx NONE

QTRU Priority TRx 255 255

RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535

TRx 0 0 0

Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes


Basic_Parameter 63 63 62

DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1

Time Slot Power Rerserve

Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment


MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

Basic_Parameter No No No

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8


UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use

CH_MGT 25 25 25

CH_MGT No No Yes

CH_MGT 4 4 4

CH_MGT 35 35 35

CH_MGT 3 3 3

CH_MGT 5 5 5

Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None

TCH Immediate Assignment

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold

Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient Power

Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation

Qtru Estimate Bts Power

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time

CH_MGT 5 5 5

CH_MGT 4 4 4

CH_MGT 6 6 6

CH_MGT 100 100 100

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

CH_MGT 50 50 50

CH_MGT 50 50 50

Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close

Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close

CH_MGT 80 80 80

CH_MGT 80 80 80

CH_MGT 60 60 60

CH_MGT 40 40 40

CH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan

Observed time of uplink received level difference

Duration of uplink received level difference

Smooth factor of uplink received level

Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels

Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load

Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell

Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Threshold(%)

Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Threshold(%)

TCH req suspend interval(s)

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold

AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed

CH_MGT 2 2 2

CH_MGT 30 30 30

CH_MGT 2 2 2

CH_MGT

CH_MGT Yes Yes 6

CH_MGT 6 6 4

CH_MGT 40 40 40

CH_MGT 25 25 25

CH_MGT 40 40 40

CH_MGT 10 10 10

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

Update Freq.of CH Record

Update Period of CH Record(min)

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual.

Filter Length for SDCCH Level




Filter Length for TCH Qual.

Filter Length for TCH Level

Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold

Interf.of DL Level Threshold

Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold

Interf.of UL Level Threshold

History Record Priority Allowed

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed

Interf. Priority Allowed

CH_MGT 1 50 50

TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No

CH_MGT Not Support DPBT Not Support

CH_MGT

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

CH_MGT 60 60 60

CH_MGT 80 80 80

CH_MGT 2 2 2

Call_Control 2 2 2

Call_Control 10 10 15

Call_Control 4 4 4

Call_Control 2 2 4



TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%)

Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) Supported

Channel Allocate Strategy

Capability preferred



Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed

TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s)

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum

Idle SDCCH Threshold N1

AMR Starting Mode(H)

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)




Call_Control 4 4 4

Call_Control 2 2 4




AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101

AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2

Call_Control 6 6 3

Call_Control 4 4 3

Call_Control 2 2 2




AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)


Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan

Call_Control 5 5 1

Call_Control 2 2 2

Call_Control 4 4 2

Call_Control

Call_Control Yes Yes 18


AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100

Call_Control 2 2 1

Call_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band

Call_Control No No No



Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No


AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)






Max Assignment Retry Times

Frequency Band of Reassign

Short Message Downlink Disabled

Immediate Assignment Opt.

Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch

Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes

TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0

TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0

Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1

Call_Control 8 8 8

Call_Control 0 0 0

FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0

Call_Control 0 0 0

1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0

Call_Control 0 0 0

900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0

Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15

Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB

Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No

TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB)

FDD Reporting Threshold

1800 Reporting Threshold

900 Reporting Threshold

3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes

Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15

FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0

Call_Control 2 2 2

FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP

FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8

Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I

Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15

Call_Control 3 3 3

Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1

Call_Control Yes Yes Yes

MBR Call_Control 0 0 0

ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO


FDD MULTIRAT Reporting

Serving Band Reporting

Power Deviation Indication

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No

Call_Control 00000 00000 00000

Call_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000

MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times

Call_Control 2 2 2

Call_Control 4 4 4




N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23

N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5

N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5

N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5

Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No

Special Access Control Class

Common Access Control Class

Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms)

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter

N200 of FACCH/Full rate

N200 of FACCH/Half rate





T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50

T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50

T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60

Call_Control -115 -115 -115


Call_Control

Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11




T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms)

T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms)

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms)

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms)

RACH Min.Access Level(dbm)

Random Access Error Threshold

TRX Aiding Function Control

Allowed & Recover When

Check ResAllowed & Recover

When Check ResTRX Aiding Not

Allowed

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))



Call_Control Disable Disable Disable

Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4

RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16


T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7

HO 30 30 30

HO No No 0

HO 4 4 4

HO 5 5 5

HO 50 50 50

HO 25 25 25

HO

AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

TDD Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

TDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s)

TDD 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)

TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold



HO 68 68 68

HO 63 63 63

HO 10 10 10

HO 1 1 1

HO 4 4 4

HO 4 4 4

HO 3 3 3

HO 4 4 4

HO 80 80 80

HO 63 63 63

HO 63 63 63

HO 90 90 90

HO As per plan As per plan As per plan

HO 5 5 5

Quick Handover Offset(dB)

Quick Handover Punish Value(dB)

Quick Handover Punish Time(s)

Ignore Measurement Report Number

Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number

Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number

Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s)

Quick Handover Static Time(0.5s)

Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s)

Quick Handover Down Trigger Level(dB)

Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB)

Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Threshold(%)

Number of Satisfactory Measurements(s)

Total Number of Measurements(s)

HO 5 5 5

HO 25 25 25

HO

HO Yes Yes 5

HO 10 10 10

HO No No No

HO 1 1 1

HO 5 5 5

HO 5 5 5

HO 2 2 2

HO 10 10 10

HO 10 10 10

HO 90 90 90

HO 1 80 80

Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s)

Outgoing OL Subcell HO level Threshold(dB)

Incoming OL Subcell HO level Threshold(dB)




Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB)

OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period(s)

Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled

Modified Step Length of UL Load HO Period(s)

Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB)

UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s)

Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB)

Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB)

Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO

UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold(%)

UL Subcell General Overload Threshold(%)

HO No No No

HO Yes Yes Yes

HO 50 50 50

HO No No No

HO 4 4 4

HO 5 5 5

HO 35 35 35

HO 50 50 50

HO 25 25 25

HO

HO 35 35 35

HO 25 25 25

HO 60 60 60

HO 65 65 65

Assignment Optimization of OL Subcell Allowed Or Not

Assignment Optimization of UL Subcell Allowed Or Not

UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold(%)

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s)

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

Inter-RAT HO Preference




Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

ReceiveQualThrshAMRHR

ReceiveQualThrshAMRFR

HO 5 5 5

HO 5 5 5

HO 90 90 90

HO 85 85 85

HO 30 30 20

HO 3 3 3

HO 10 10 10

HO 40 40 40

HO 10 10 10

HO 5 5 5

HO 5 5 5

HO Yes Yes Yes

HO 32 32 35

HO 18 18 25

En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step

En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Period

En Iuo Out Cell Serious OverLoad Threshold

En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold

En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold

MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail

Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s)

Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s)

Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s)

Underlay HO Step Level

Underlay HO Step Period(s)

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell

HO

HO 0 0 0

HO No No No

HO 63 63 63

HO 35 35 35

Assign Optimum Layer HO

UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4

UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5

TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0

TA Threshold HO 63 63 63

RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60

RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5

RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer

Underlaid Subcell

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC

System Optimization

System Optimization

System Optimization

TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref.

TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed

TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.

Assign-optimum-level Threshold

System Optimization

System Optimization

System Optimization

HO 0 0 0

TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

HO No No No

HO Yes Yes Yes

OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

HO 80 80 80

HO 4 4 3

K Bias HO 0 0 0

HO 30 30 30

HO 40 40 40

HO 30 30 30

HO 6 6 6

HO 20 20 20

UO Signal Intensity Difference

RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed

RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed

Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO

RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO

UL Expected Level at HO Access

Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s)

Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO

Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.

Forbidden time after MAX Times

HO 3 3 3

HO 15 15 15

HO 2 2 2

HO 3 3 3

Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5

Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10

Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25

HO 75 75 75

Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85

HO 10 10 10

ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65

MAX Consecutive HO Times

MS Fast-moving Time Threshold

MS Fast-moving Valid Cells

MS Fast-moving Watch Cells

Load Req.on Candidate Cell

System Flux Threshold for Load HO

RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5

RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50



RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53

RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54

RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55

RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56

RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57

RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58

RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59

RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60

RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70

HO 8 8 8Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit

HO 60 60 60

No Dl Mr.HO Allowed HO No No No

Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0

Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10








UL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60

DL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60

HO 255 255 255

No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit

Emergency HO TA Threshold

DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open

CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255

UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10

RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5

HO 6 6 6

HO 2 2 2

HO 30 30 30

HO 6 6 6

HO 2 2 2

HO 6 6 6

HO 2 2 2

HO 6 6 6

HO 2 2 2

HO 30 30 30

Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

Filter Length for SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT

Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP

Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP

Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP

Penalty Time after TA HO(s)

HO 63 63 63

HO 15 15 15

HO 63 63 63

HO 30 30 30

Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4

HO 6 6 4

HO 3 3 2

HO 3 3 2

HO 6 6 4

HO 6 6 4

HO 4 4 4

HO 25 25 16

HO Twice every second

HO Yes Yes Yes

Penalty Level after TA HO

Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)

Penalty Level after BQ HO

Penalty Level after HO Fail

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual

Filter Length for SDCCH Level

Filter Length for TCH Qual

Filter Length for TCH Level

Allowed M.R Number Lost

Min Power Level For Direct Try

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR

Twice every second

Twice every second

Transfer BS/MS Power Class

Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No

MR.Preprocessing HO No No No

HO No No No

Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

HO No No No

HO 6 6 4

HO 6 6 4

HO 2 2 2

HO 4 4 2

ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open

HO 2 2 2

HO 3 3 3

HO NO NO NO

H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10

MS Power Prediction after HO

Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed

Min Interval for Emerg.HOs

Min Interval for Consecutive HOs

Min Interval for SDCCH HOs

Min Interval for TCH HOs

TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s)

TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time(s)

Quick Handover Enable

F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25

HO 4 4 4

HO 5 5 5

HO Yes Yes YES

HO 15 15 15

HO 10 10 10

HO 3 3 3

HO 25 25 25

HO No No No

PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2

PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3

Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2

HO 3 3 3

HO 2 2 2

Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s)

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s)

Intracell F-H HO Allowed

Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell

Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

Inter-layer HO Threshold

Inter-System Handover Enable

Layer HO Watch Time(s)

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s)

HO 3 3 3

Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2

HO 3 3 3

HO 20 20 20

HO 10 10 10

HO Yes Yes Yes

HO Yes Yes Yes

TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

HO No No No

HO No No No

Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time(s)

Edge HO Watch Time(s)

Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold

Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold

Interference HO Allowed

Concentric Circles HO Allowed

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

Load HO Allowed HO No No No

Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No

SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No

Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes

PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0

TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0

ACS Idle_Mode No No No

CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No

PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes

CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB

Idle_Mode 60 60 20

BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

4 Multiframe Period

4 Multiframe Period

2 Multiframe Period

NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No

Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32

ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes

Other_Properties 10 10 10

WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000

WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000

T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000

T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10

TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000

T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000




Timer for UL Data Forward(ms)



T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000



Other_Properties No No No








Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on

ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms)

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable

Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed

Qtru Signal Merge Switch

MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period

Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period

Paging Numbers of one Optimizing Msgs

Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface

Other_Properties

Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes





Other_Properties








Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type

Interference Band

Measurement Algorithm II

Interference Band Measurement

Algorithm II

Interference Band

Measurement Algorithm II

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch

Lower-level sublink resources preemption switch

Sublink resources preemption switch

Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH

IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH

Frequency Scan Result Type

Maximum/Mean Value

Maximum/Mean Value

Maximum/Mean Value

Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout

Drop Optimize Resource Check

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time

Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure















Drop Optimize Equipment Failure

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure

Drop Optimize Release Indication

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail)

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail)

Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)

Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response)

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)

Directly Magnifier Site Flag

Aiding Delay Protect Time(min)

Abis Flow Control Permitted

Support Half Rate Other_Properties Yes Yes No


PWRC Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes

ActGene Other_Properties 5 5 5

PS LowPri ServicePRI Other_Properties 6 6 6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI Other_Properties 4 4 4

CS Data ServicePRI Other_Properties 5 5 5

CS Voice ServicePRI Other_Properties 3 3 3





CCCH Load Threshold Other_Properties 80 80 80


MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

Included Angle(Degree)

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

Overload Indication Period

CCCH Load Indication Period(s)



Other_Properties NO NO NO






Frame Start Time Other_Properties 65535 65535 65535






Radio Resource Report Period(s)

Frequency Adjust Value

Frequency Adjust Switch

VSWR TRX Error Threshold

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold

Power Output Reduction Threshold

Power Output Error Threshold

DC Bias Voltage Threshold

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)







SMCBC DRX Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes

Data service Allowed Other_Properties 118 118 118

Other_Properties StartUp StartUp not StartUp

Other_Properties report report not report

Other_Properties 255 255 Yes

Power_Control 53 53 53








Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

Power boost before HO enabled or not

Voice quality report switch

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB)







Power_Control 0 0 0

Power_Control 8 8 8

Power_Control 8 8 8













HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB)

HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB)

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII UL RexLev Lower Threshold


Power_Control 6 6 6

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 1 1 1

Power_Control 1 1 1

Power_Control 3 3 3

Power_Control 3 3 3

Power_Control 8 8 8

Power_Control 8 8 8






HwIII UL RexLev Upper Threshold

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor

HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Factor

HwIII UL Rex Qual. Slide Window

HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length

HwIII UL RexLev Exponent Filter Length

HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB)

HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB)

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)






Power_Control 6 6 6

Power_Control 6 6 6

Power_Control 1 1 1

Power_Control 1 1 1

Power_Control 3 3 3

Power_Control 3 3 3

Power_Control 3 3 3

Power_Control 1 1 1

Power_Control 3 3 3

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL RexLev Lower Threshold

HwIII DL RexLev Upper Threshold

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor

HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Factor

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window

HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Exponent Filter Length

HwIII DL RexLev Exponent Filter Length

HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number

HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number

HwIII Down Link Power Control Adjust Period

Power_Control 3 3 3

Power_Control 5 5 5

AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16

Power_Control 0 0 0

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 0 0 0

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 8 8 8


Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 2 2 3

HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period

HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed

AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff

AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold

AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.




AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control 0 0 1



Power_Control 2 2 3

Power_Control 0 0 1



Power_Control 2 2 0

Power_Control 2 2 0

Power_Control Yes Yes Yes

Power_Control 6 6 6

Power_Control 6 6 6

Power_Control 6 6 6

Power_Control 6 6 6

AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold

AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold

AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold

AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted

AMR MR. Compensation Allowed

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3

BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16

Power_Control 0 0 0

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 0 0 0

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 8 8 8


Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 4 4 4

Power_Control 2 2 0

Power_Control 2 2 0

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff

DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff

UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2



DL MR. Number Predicted

UL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control Yes Yes Yes

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control 5 5 5

Power_Control

Power_Control 2 2 3

Power_Control 0 0 1



Power_Control 2 2 3

Power_Control 0 0 1



MR. Compensation Allowed

Filter Length for DL Qual.

Filter Length for UL Qual.

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power Control Algorithm Switch

HWII Power Control

HWII Power Control

HW-II Power Control

DL Qual. Lower Threshold

DL Qual. Upper Threshold

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

UL Qual. Lower Threshold

UL Qual. Upper Threshold

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch

Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB

Data_In_PCU 10 10 10


Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14

Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1


Data_In_PCU 3 3 3


Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400

Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000

Data_In_PCU 120 120 120

Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control

Measured Receive Power Level Channel

BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH

Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode

Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode

Maximum Value of N3105



Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms)

Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms)

Release Delay of Non-extended Uplink TBF(ms)


Data_In_PCU 5 5 5


Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 1 1 1


Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit



Data_In_PCU

Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6

Data_In_PCU 4 4 4


Load Reselect Level Threshold

GPRS Quality Threshold

EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold

EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold

Cell Reselect Interval(s)

Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold

Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period

Cell Normal Reselection Allowed

Cell Load Reselection Allowed

Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed

2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy

Preference for 2G Cell



Allowed Measure Report Missed Number

Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%)



Data_In_PCU 200 200 200


Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30

Data_In_PCU 6 6 6


Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Data_In_PCU

Data_In_PCU 650 650 650


Data_In_PCU 6 6 6

Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Load Reselection Start Threshold(%)

MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%)

MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold

Cell Penalty Last Time(s)

Cell Reselection Hysterisis

Min Access Level Threshold

PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy

No handover between

underlaid subcell and overlaid

subcell

No handover between underlaid

subcell and overlaid subcell

No handover between

underlaid subcell and overlaid

subcell

Transmission Delay of POC Service

Max. GBR for POC Service

Min. GBR for POC Service

Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS

Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6

Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED

Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2


BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Data_In_PCU LA LA LA

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5


Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2

Downlink Default MCS Type

Downlink Fixed MCS Type

Uplink Default MCS Type

Uplink Fixed MCS Type

Link Quality Control Mode

Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3






Downlink Default CS Type


Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5


Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1

Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED

Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1



ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Downlink Fixed CS Type

Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3






Background Service Priority Weight




Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU


Data_In_PCU Only convert at UL






MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU

Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB

Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot

Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel

All dynamic channels can be

pre-empted


pre-empted


preempted.

Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel

Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell

Only convert at UL

only convert dynamic channel

at UL

PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold

PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold

Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell

Report the frequencies of six strongest

cells

Report the frequencies of six

strongest cells

Report the frequencies of six

strongest cells

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength

Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive

Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access

Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB

Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec

Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes

Data_In_PCU 0 0 0

Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard


Data_In_PCU No No No


PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6

Maximum TX Power for Access PCH

Minimum Receiving level for Access

Permit Cell Access

Permit Cell Access

Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area

Cell Reselection Forbidden Time

Allow MS to Access to another Cell

Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis

Support PSI Status Message

Allow MR Command or not

Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16






Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0

PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4

PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access

Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4




Data_In_PCU 0.96sec 0.96sec 0.96sec

Data_In_PCU 15.36sec 15.36sec 15.36sec

Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.24sec 0.24sec

Data_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec


Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec

Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1

Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0



Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode

GPRS Reselection Offset

GPRS Temporary Offset

Interference Frequency

Extension Measurement Command

BSS Paging Coordination

Support 11BIT EGPRS Access

Routing Area Color Code

Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU


Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0

Pan Max. Data_In_PCU 12 12 12

Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4

Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10

Data_In_PCU

Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit

Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s

T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms

T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms

Data_In_PCU

Packet access of level 4



Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH

Network Control Mode

Control Acknowledge Type

Four access pulses by default



Max. Duration of DRX(s)

Network Operation Mode

Network Operation

Mode IINetwork Operation

Mode IINetwork

Operation Mode II

Description Configuration Policy

None

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). None

This parameter should be set as required.

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m

The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is high. This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells for

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460.

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon

This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the same layer have the same priority. For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.

Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo

This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated.

This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None


This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 dB. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits

This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function.In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb

Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in advance.No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC sends th

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a

This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report the number of neighbor cells.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC

For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually modif

This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed.GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.DCS1800: The cell

This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area.Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.For example, value 0 indic

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.

This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value


None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None

This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120

This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t

This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO

This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses form a concentric cell. Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL

As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use different frequency reuse modes. The concentric cell technology can be combined

This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. In

When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not configured in the UL subcell.


The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment


If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi

None

None

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. None

None

None

None

This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS. None

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter specifies the number of a subrack. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

None

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.

This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047

This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated.Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to Not Activated.

This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically.

Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged.The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified manually.

This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.

This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located.

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack.

None

This parameter is to be viewed only.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack.

This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the optical interface board, each optical interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62.

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board.

This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port over the Abis interface.The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3 specifies the first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot. Accordingly, the timeslot numbering is likewise.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links share one number. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can realize average interference and frequency diversity.

The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The double-transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH, but do not support the cross-cabinet baseband FH.

This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater this parameter is, the smaller the transmit power is. When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.BTS3X: 0-10BTS3001C: 0-13BTS3002C: 0-10Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012，BTS3012AE，BTS3006C): 0-10DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM：0-10

Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power Level; however, when the antenna is over high and covers too many cells, you should lower the antenna and increase the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse.Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network, the power level configuration should ensure that the EIRPs of the cells are basically the same.When configuring the power level, you should note that different TRXs in a cell can have different losses due to different combination modes.

This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels.

This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.

This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm.

The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is. In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority.

This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external power supply is cut off.This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate channels, or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels. If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No, the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly restored. This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic adjustment priority in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel assignment, the channels on the TRX not supporting the dynamic adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the channels on the TRX supporting the dynamic adjustment are used for dynamic adjustment. Thus, the access requests of users are satisfied.This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. There are 50 levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.

This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise, the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.

This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is generated. If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to Abnormal Release Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery alarm.

If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.

If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.

If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the no-traffic alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period.

If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour).This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink and downlink unbalance. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced.This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not balanced only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced.

When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity.

This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX. The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter Independent or Combining.The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter and DDIVERSITY.The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power Booster Technology, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. The BTSs not included above do not support the RF tranmsit modes listed above.

None

None

None



None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX. None

None

None

None


This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. The Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number. This parameter specifies the following: Currently, when the BSC performs the static power control on the TRX, the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be adjusted in the step of 2 dB, so the TRX output power may be different from the cabinet top output power of the BTS. Therefore, through the setting of this parameter, a finer step can be provided for adjusting the cabinet top output power of the BTS.

If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel allocation. This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping.

In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty, then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly. The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the BCCH TRX to be transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in turn. Thus the quality of the BCCH TRX data received by the MS is improved and the network performance is enhanced. Only the double-transceiver BTS can be configured with the antenna hopping function. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC.This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board.This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC.When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31.When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board, each optical interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2-HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs on a TRX.

This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.

This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel connects to the BTS TMU.

This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU. None

None

This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.

None

None

None

None


None

This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located.

There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.

This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto.You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is 0.

This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network.

This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.


This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.


The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.

This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSS does not support the corresponding encryption algorithm. The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1.

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request.


If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.


The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved.

This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC preferentially assigns channels on the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands and the cell is configured with TRXs operating on the P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands.This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU: When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required power of cell, If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not allowed to assign the channel.

The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.

This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.This parameter specifies the following definitions:1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.2. Static power sharing algorithm.3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing algorithm is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the MCPA power sharing technology, the static power specification is different from dynamic power specification. When there are several carriers, the maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic power specification is greater. In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet needs to compare with the competitor power on the top of cabinet. If the static power on the top of cabinet ≥ competitor power on the top of cabinet, the static power sharing algorithm is used; if the dynamic power on the top of cabinet ≥ competitor power on the top of cabinet ≥ static power on the top of cabinet, the dynamic power sharing algorithm is used.

When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used, but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is disabled. The power must be adjusted or the downlink power control must be enabled.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.

If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.

The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values.This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded.During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another timeslot.P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the Duration of uplink received level difference.This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid subcell and overlaid subcell.

The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH Traffic Busy Threshold (%) is invalid for the concentric cell.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate channels, which influences the speech quality.

The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH Traffic Busy Threshold (%) is invalid for the concentric cell.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate channels, which influences the speech quality.

This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.

This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.

This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load.

When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is preferred.

This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU.The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required. For details about cell load levels, refer to the Cell Load Threshold. Relevant algorithm: AMR call channel assignment algorithmsThis parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC.During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required.

None

None

None

None

None

None

The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times out. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to improve the priority of the channel.Principles of taking values are as follows: Generally, set this parameter to 2. If a fixed interference source exists or an equipment fault occurs, the update frequency for the affected cells can be set to 4 or 6. The Update Period of CH Record is used together with Update Freq of CH Record, In this way, the channel can be assigned even if the channel priority is continuously lowered within a period of time.

When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the history record of channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority of each channel is reduced by Update Freq.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this parameter to increase the channel priority.Principles of taking values are as follows: Generally, a high-frequency adjustment is used. For example, the update period should be set in such a way that it ranges from half an hour to one hour because several busy hours are the major concerns during the actual operation in a day. If the parameter is set to a too small value, the result of the history record is meaningless. If the parameter is set to a too great value, the result cannot be seen in time during busy hours. If a fixed interference source exists or an equipment fault occurs, the update period for the affected cells can be set in such a way that it ranges from several hours to one day. This parameter is used together with Update Freq. of CH Record so that the channel can be assigned even if the history record priority decreases.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to determine the signal quality on signaling channels. The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of signaling channels, and then determine the signal quality on signaling channels.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then determine the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.

This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.

This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.

This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs. The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold. The uplink interference occurs.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink

interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold.this indicates the signal is good, but the quality is poor, that is, the uplink interference occurs. The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record priority preferentially.This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially.This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel interference measurement is performed. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is selected preferentially.

This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment. By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the full-rate TCH is assigned preferentially.

This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. Yes: Open No: Close

It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network.

This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission diversity or dynamic PBT: 0: not supported 1: dynamic transmission diversity supported 2: dynamic PBT supported

This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. These types include: Capacity with a higher priority Quality with a higher priority PS coordination with a relatively higher priority PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority The priority of different types is as follows: Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation factors > management factors Priority by quality: quality factors > capacity factors > PS cooperation factors > management factors Relative priority by PS domain: capacity factors > PS cooperation factors > quality factors > management factors Absolute priority by PS domain: PS cooperation factors > capacity factors > quality factors > management factors

This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one full-rate TCH is allowed in a cell. If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. If this parameter is set to Yes, calls may fail when the timeslot arrangement fails and when the MS does not select the TCHF in the concentric cell.

Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement can be performed in the cell.This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH.

The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the counter remains unchanged. If the value of the counter is equal to or lower than 0 after adjustment, the SDCCH is converted to the TCH.

If this parameter is set too small, it cannot correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation algorithm becomes less sensitive and consequently the SDCCHs stay in idle state and cannot be rolled back for a long period of time.

When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter, the BSC does not initiate the conversion.

If this parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large.If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this

parameter, the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH.Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows:1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment.2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) ≥ 4 or the number of TRXs in the cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF.3.The sum of the number of SDCCHs in the cell plus eight is smaller than the maximum number of SDCCHs allowed in the cell.

If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state;If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot meet the requirements.

This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively.

The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has five bits.

Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected simultaneously. If only one coding rate is specified by this parameter, then the parameter AMR Starting Mode (H) must be set to 0, which means the lowest coding rate. All AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, or 2. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningful.

This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively.

The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits.

Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected simultaneously. If only one coding full rate is specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set to 0. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless. If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless. If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, or 2. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless. If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningful.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment on the Um interface fails.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the call completion rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is improved. This, however, increases the load of the BSC.

In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency band or of different frequency bands. If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is the same as what is used before the reassignment. If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used before the reassignment. You can set this parameter to improve the deterioration of QoS caused by the interference, carrier channel fault, or engineering fault.

To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is recommended that the default value Different Band be used. That is, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used in the original assignment.

This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short messages. In specific cells, sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.

Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this parameter must be set to No. If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short messages.

The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the network.

In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the MS if the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%). This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest priority performs handover, and the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a certain MS with lower priority releases the channel, the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after release.

The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B, and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the support of the MSC, HLR, MS (including SIM) is required.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC initiates a re-assignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC initiates many re-assignment procedures and thus the BSC load increases.

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter.After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization.0: 0 dB1: 6 dB...6: 36 dB7: ∞

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement report, and then sequence the TDD cells.0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB ...7: 42 dB

This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the best cell list or in the measurement report.

A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell.0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable)1: -28 dB2: -24 dB... 15: 28 dB

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD cell is valid. If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid.After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority sequence.0: 0 dB1: 6 dB...6: 36 dB7: ∞

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell. When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report.0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB ...7: 42 dB

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a DCS1800 cell is valid. If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence.0: 0 dB1: 6 dB...6: 36 dB7: ∞

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB...7: 42 dB

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 cell is valid. When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank.0: 0 dB1: 6 dB...6: 36 dB7: ∞

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell. When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band, the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB ...7: 42 dB

This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode. In connection mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.0: -98 dBm1: -94 dBm... 6: -74 dBm7: (always)8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm ...14: -54 dBm15: ∞ (never)

This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the least SCALE while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level.

This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with an invalid BSIC.

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the BSIC must be decoded.

This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.0: -98 dBm1: -94 dBm...6: -74 dBm7: (always)8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm...14: -54 dBm15: ∞ (never)

This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be one candidate cell for cell reselection. 0: -20 dB1: -6 dB2: -18 dB3: -8 dB4: -16 dB5: -10 dB6: -14 dB7: -12 dB.Default value: -20 dB.This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the best cell list or in the measurement report.

Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I in GSM. RSCP, Received Signal Code Power

Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable)1: -28 dB2: -24 dB… 15: 28 dB

This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained.

This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells.0: -98 dBm1: -94 dBm2: -90 dBm3: -86 dBm4: -82 dBm5: -78 dBm6: -74 dBm7：(always), that is, the MS keeps searching for 3G cells8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm10: -70 dBm11: -66 dBm12: -62 dBm13: -58 dBm14: -54 dBm15：∞(never), that is, the MS does not search for 3G cells

If the system information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on different frequency bands. When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the serving cell, a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported.These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements:1. The receive levels of the neighbor cells must be higher than 900 Reporting Threshold or 1800 Reporting Threshold.2. The BSIC of a neighbor cell must be valid.3. The signals of the neighbor cells must be the strongest among all the neighbor cells on the same frequency band.

Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.

When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.

This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.

In a multiple band network, this parameter can be set on the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band. If this parameter is set to 0, the MS reports the measurement results of six neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal regardless of the band at which the neighbor cell is located. If this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the measurement result of a neighbor cell known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at which the neighboring cells are located. If this parameter is set to 2, the MS reports the measurement results of two neighbor cell known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of the bands at which the neighbor cells are located. If this parameter is set to 3, the MS reports the measurement results of three neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of the bands at which the neighbor cells are located. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are the same and there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are different and the MS is expected to enter a band preferentially, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 3. In other cases except the first two cases, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each band of multi-band MSs. In the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly described. When paging is made or the BA2 table is sent between different bands, the CM3 message must be known. For dual-band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the MSC sends a CLASSMARK REQUEST message after the MS reports an EST IND message. The MS then reports the CLASSMARK UPDATE message. The connection time of the MS is affected.

For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network, it is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used, it is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.

This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value.Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.

If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs whose access class is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. For example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or the Abis interface flow is overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of some classes, the traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.

This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access the network. During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be set to 1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on installation or maintenance.In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. For example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH is overloaded, or the Abis interface is overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of some classes, the traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.

This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval.

This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious.

Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or retransmitted.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS.

If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent.If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a full-rate channel).For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a half-rate channel).For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multi-frame release.For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame.For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.

Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not send the LAPDm N200 parameter. If a BTS does not support this parameter, the parameter should be set to No. Otherwise, the BTS cannot be initialized.

None

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the

Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services.

If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the

Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services.


This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.


This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.


This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um interface. T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement retransmission mechanism.Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both ends are waiting if a message is lost. At this time, the deadlock of the system occurs.Therefore, the transmit end must establish a timer. When the timer expires, the transmit end regards that the receive end does not receive the message and then the transmit end retransmits the message.The number of retransmissions is determined by N200.T200 and the N200 ensure that the data link layer sequentially transmits data and that the transmission is free from errors.

If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is decreased. If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted.

For the BTS3X in 03.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the receive level of the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an access request exists on this timeslot, and determines together with the value of Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH access is valid. Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level. Therefore, for the BTS24, RACH Min.Access Level is shielded. For the BTS2X (excluding the BTS24), the RACH Min.Access Level parameter is invalid.

Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min.Access Level.

This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences. According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network. But the error report rate is high. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the network. This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control:

TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is restored. Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is performed immediately after the faulty TRX is restored. Allowed & Recover When Check Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the switchback is not immediately performed after the faulty TRX is restored. Instead, the switchback is performed during the resource check in the early morning, usually 2 o'clock.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding function. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell.BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered.Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in baseband FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as a non-hopping cell.Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved in baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the originally configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH aiding switchback can be performed and the cell is restored to the baseband FH mode.After TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH aiding) or switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized.All types of BTSs will not perform the aiding function within 15 minutes after the default cell is initialized (you can configure the BTSs in this period).

This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this parameter has six bits. The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the following speech versions respectively: half-rate version 3, half-rate version 2, half-rate version 1, full-rate version 3, full-rate version 2, and full-rate version 1. Here, versions 3, 2, and 1 indicate AMR, EFR, and FR respectively. If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech version. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSC does not support the corresponding speech version. For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate versions 1-2 and half-rate version 1 are supported. In the HDLC networking mode, if only full-rate version 1 among the three full-rate versions is selected, it is recommended that the AEC delay of all the DSPs in the DPUX and DPUC be set to 141 so that the downlink traffic flow is further decreased. This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

None

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.

If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells.

When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.

This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. The parameter and the paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of retransmissions of the paging message. The total paging times is approximately equal to this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. At present, the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. The BSC does not support the mechanism for resending the paging message; therefore, it processes a paging message each time it receives the paging message. The BTS2X, BTS3X, and double-transceiver BTS support paging retransmission.

Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging success rate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, congestion may occur.

For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state. When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The threshold setting does not affect the normal access of the MS.For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter specifies the level threshold for the BTS to determine an MS random access.When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold and the access demodulation is successful, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the RACH access is valid based on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the BTS2X, the parameter RACH Busy Threshold is used to determine whether the timeslot is busy. In addition, the parameter affects the normal access of the MS. The MS access is allowed only when the level of the MS random access burst is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold.For the BTS24, this parameter has two functions. One function is indicating the level threshold of the MS random access for the system to determine the RACH busy state. When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. The other function is indicating whether the MS access is allowed.The MS access is allowed only when access level (including random access and handover access) is greater than the threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST during asynchronous handover. For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter does not affect MS access but affects the reporting of CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level received by the BCCH on the network side is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold, the CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether the decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is lower than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose decoding is successful is also counted. The measurement period is the Average RACH Load Timeslot Number. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports overload messages to the BSC. If the value is too great, the BTS cannot determine the status of the RACH timeslot correctly. For the BTS24, if this parameter is used to determine busy timeslot, its setting is consistent with that in the BTS30. If this parameter is the level threshold for valid random access, its setting is consistent with that in the BTS20. The settings of the BTS312, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, BTS3002C, and double-transceiver BTS must be consistent with the meaning and requirement of the BTS30.

This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure.When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the counter increases by 2.When the value of the counter is 0, the radio link fails.The BTS sends a connection failure indication message to the BSC.The number of SACCH multi-frames and the radio link failure counter in the system message specify the radio link failure time on the uplink and that on the downlink respectively. The judgment standard is whether the SACCH message is correctly decoded.

If the value of this parameter does not match with the value supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1.

The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value of this parameter is 70 ms.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.

This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell.

This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a 3G cell.

During a handover decision, if this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.

None

None

None

None

None

None

During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.

This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.

This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed and no fast handover decision is made.

This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving handover.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.

During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold, a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

None

None

None

After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.

This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.

This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.

If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the OL subcell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.

To prevent ping-pong handovers, this parameter should be decided before the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) - SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of UL And OL Subcells.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank zone between the

UL subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is, the larger the blank zone is. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of serving cell and that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that it is the boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) > Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL subcell.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered.

If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter, the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell load is not allowed.

If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is adversely affected.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell.


This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.

This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.


According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.


If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB.


If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).


If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell.

This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a 3G cell.

During the handover decision: If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL

subcell to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.

None

None

None

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell.

This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.


When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.

When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the previous target cell after the penalty time.

After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.

After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.

If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the UL subcell handover.

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level strip of the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. In other words, the time taken in subtracting Underlay HO Step Level from the handover strip is Underlay HO Step Period.


When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously, calls with lower level may be handed over first. This does not conform to the principle that the call of the best quality should be handed over preferentially. Therefore, the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the time taken in subtracting Underlay HO Step Level from the signal level of the handover strip.


This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell.When this parameter is set to Yes, If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the OL subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold. If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered, and if the UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer is started when the traffic load in the UL subcell is greater than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, thus handing over the MSs in the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is stopped, and the MSs in the UL subcell are not handed over to the OL subcell. When this parameter is set to No, the traffic load in the UL subcell is not taken into account for triggering the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell.

This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

None

None

None

None

None

#N/A #N/A

None

In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be processed in one of the following modes:Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms.

For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example, 900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur frequently and are generally not triggered at the edges of adjacent cells. In this case, the recommended value of this parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the case that success rate of handovers drops, UL Subcell is preferred for incoming BSC handovers.

In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in one of the following modes: System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer. During the comparison and determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis into consideration. Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms.If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.

If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-optimum-level Threshold, and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.. Only when the receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to Assign-optimum-level Threshold and the TA is lower than TA Threshold of Assignment Pref., a TCH in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the MS. Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to ensure successful assignment.

When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case, Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.

If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-optimum-level Threshold, and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.. Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to Assign-optimum-level Threshold and the TA is lower than TA Threshold of Assignment Pref., a TCH in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the MS. Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to ensure successful assignment. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

In a concentric cell, the TCH can be assigned in the following modes: System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH, the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell.When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid.


This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. The RX_LEV Threshold parameter refers to the threshold of the downlink receive level. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of places is five. The OL subcell and the UL subcell have different transmit power. Therefore, the receive level of the MS in the UL subcell is different from that in the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the power that should be compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this parameter should be the sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner Insertion Loss Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. This value is measured at the site. Multiple-point measurements should be performed when different antennas are used for the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. In other words, the power of the OL subcell is not compensated.


This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled.

This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle.

Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.

This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call drops caused by too low a uplink receive level. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur.

This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.

Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer.

If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer, penalty is performed. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.

The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers.

This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.

When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.

This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover for a certain period.

This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too great value, the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently.

The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving slow.

When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this parameter is set to a too small value, the judgment on whether the MS fast passes a cell may be incorrect.

In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. The value of Load HO Step Level must be smaller than that of the Load HO Bandwidth.

The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handover strip during load handover.

When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold, all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. This parameter specifies the period for each load handover level.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of each level is long.

The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is allowed.

The setting of this parameter determines the maximum width of the handover strip during load handover.

If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs handed over from other cells. Otherwise, the cell rejects the MSs handed over from other cells.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number of handover requests that are rejected increases.

When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell. The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of load handovers increases.

System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control level of the system. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates the highest level. A load handover is allowed only when the system flux is lower than the value of this parameter. The handover performed over the maximum threshold may have tremendous impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter should not be set to a higher value. 1) The flow control level algorithm for the assigned system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The value range is from 0 to 11.2) Flow control threshold for the CPU to start to discard the channel access messages and paging messages: 80%. Flow control threshold for the CPU to discard all channel access messages and paging messages: 100%. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An increase of 5% means an increase of 2 levels. Level 10 is the highest. The level value can be 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10.

The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on the system is increased.


The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.


The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.


The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.


The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, this parameter is invalid.

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.


















If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.


If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.


If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is allowed.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered.

This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.

If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink measurement report emergency handover is triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher value, the no downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered.

This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm. If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. If this parameter is set to 1, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is enabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is allowed in this cell.This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period.If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter Parameters A1 to A8. For details, refer to Filter Parameters A1-A8.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.

This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the configured value): C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) +…+ A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is the uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B, and if C(nt) is below the Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid dropping.Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 to a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than or equal to 0.For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you need to set A3 to A8 to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of the cell level in an MR.You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is complicated.

Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly.















This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter.

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover. In the areas with small space between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower value.

This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected.

When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the SUBSET values should be used irrespective of how DTX is indicated in the subsequent measurement reports. When this parameter is set to 1, whether the FULLSET values or the SUBSET values should be selected depends on the DTX indication bit in the measurement report. That is, if the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be selected; otherwise, the FULLSET values should be selected.This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after

handover failure due to data configuration.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.


This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion.


When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.


This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.


When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the SDCCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.


This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.


This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.


This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.


This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.


This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.

This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.


This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the serving cell is not allowed. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a target cell. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during out-going BSC handover, or a message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during internal handover. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the

timing advance. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision.

When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH.


This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.


This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.

This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during

interpolation. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs are received.

Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to a great value for emergency handovers.

This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry.

This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.

This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is increased.

This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the BTS to the BSC.

When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail.

None

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

None

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and the original MR to the BSC.

In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this parameter should be set to No.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC.

When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC preprocesses the measurement reports. In this case, the Transfer Original MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid.When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis interface and the load of the BSC are reduced. Thus, the response time is shortened and the network performance is improved. When setting this parameter, you should determine whether the BTS supports the configured power control algorithms. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead

of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to occur. If a handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the serving cell. These kinds of penalties can be performed on cells in one BSC or on external cells.

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned.

This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.

After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period specified by this parameter.

This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial phase of call establishment. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement Reports smaller than the report frequency of the measurement reports from the MS. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a small value. If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a great value.

After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified by this parameter.

This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase of call establishment. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement Reports smaller than the report frequency of the measurement reports from the MS. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a small value. If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a great value.

This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. 0: Close 1: Open

According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for other calls. This ensures the call performance of other calls.According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for other calls. This ensures the call performance of other calls.

This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. 0: NO; 1: YES

This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.

The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover can be triggered.

None

None

This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover can be triggered.

The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the two parameters.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the two parameters.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover.

The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum uplink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not met.

1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads to handover failures or call drops. 2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the receive level minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access level offset.

The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the adjacent cell. Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not met. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to handover failures or call drops. 2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the uplink receive level minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access level offset. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover.

This parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold - Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold + Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64.

This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based on receive level. The cell takes a low priority for handovers.

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.

According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

None

None

None

None

According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.


According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.


According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.


If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.

If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.

This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over.

This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is.

This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is handed over to a neighbor cell.

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).

The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over to the target cell that has a higher priority than the serving cell.This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover

algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.

Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS.

In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed for the DCS1800 cell. Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No. To support the rapid level drop handover, the BSC must have the original MR.

This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.

If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.

Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas, common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for high-speed circumstances

When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.

This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality.

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408.This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this parameter is set to 1, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 7 or 8 message. This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2.If this parameter is properly configured, the number of handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the same priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.This parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs.

The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset.This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell

reselection. 1: barred0: allowedTogether with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority0 0 Normal Normal0 1 Barred Barred1 0 Low Normal1 1 Low Normal

The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.

Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.

The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions:Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in the system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s.A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.

This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.

An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes.

This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.

It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic.

To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC.In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period.When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell.When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on.In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells.

This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.

The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance.

This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH.This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.

None

None

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.

The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops.

This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority0 0 Normal Normal0 1 Barred Barred1 0 Low Normal1 1 Low Normal

The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be set to 0. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.

This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive transmissions of channel request messages by an MS. To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH, an access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. The algorithm specifies three parameters: Tx-integer (T for short), maximum number of retransmissions (RET), and S related to channel combination. This parameter works with the configuration of the CCCH to determine the parameter S. The relations between this parameter and the configuration of the CCCH are as follows: When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 55 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 41 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 76 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, S is 217 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, S is 115 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1…, MAX(T, 8)-1}. The number of timeslots (excluding the timeslot used to send messages) between two adjacent channel request messages is a random value from the collection of {S, S+1, …, S+T-1}.When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and RACH conflicts decrease.When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel request messages increases, and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH.The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is decreased when T and S increase. Under normal conditions, an appropriate T value should be used to ensure that S is as low as possible, and ensure that AGCH and SDCCH are not overloaded.

If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T should be set to a great value. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is large, T should be set to a small value. The increase in T and S prolongs the access time of an MS, thus affecting the access performance of the whole network. Therefore, appropriate values should be selected for T and S.When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low. Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted to make the sum of S and T great.When Abis interface use the satellite transmission,this parameter must be 32.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.

If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. If TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 10 ms; if IP transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms.

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.


When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.


In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.


This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate.

For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio resources too much, and influences the channel resource utilization. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the call reestablishment success rate.

This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.


The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.


This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.


This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.


Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable. None

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate.

In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message.


In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.


The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH channel.


This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.

This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping supports the intelligent power consumption decrease.Qtru Signal Merge Switch The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot.The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded.During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another timeslot.P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the Duration of uplink received level difference.This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.

This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an integral multiple of 50 ms.

The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service.When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service.When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service.

This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted.

This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services.

This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers.

The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intra-cell handover.

Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result.Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and diversity levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennasMaximum/Mean: maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. The function of repeater is simpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic volume of network. The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance between repeaters is long, the handover between repeaters can only be asynchronous. Otherwise, the handover may fail.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the synchronous handover is performed.

This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized.The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this parameter is used to specify a delay.

If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding function after cell initialization.

This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested, some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow. By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the BSC initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends the overload message to the BSC when a large number of MSs access the network. In this case, system failure may occur.

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.

None

None

This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.05. In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19, mapping to the following: {43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5} respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5 (mapping to 33 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 19 (mapping to 5 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs. In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 31, mapping to the following: {30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,32} respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0 (mapping to 30 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 15 (mapping to 0 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.

This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and 6 messages. If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX.

This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene.The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. The effect of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth is occupied by services.

The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used.




This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.

This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell.Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2

This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus, the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network.If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends an overload message to the BSC with a long interval. Thus, system faults may occur.

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication message to the BSC. The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC. As a result, the BSC frequently reports overload indication messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends overload indication messages to the BSC only when a large number of MSs access the network and when the system resources are insufficient. Therefore, the access requests on the RACH and all the messages on the PCH are discarded.

This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot, that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for sending the CCCH overload message is CCCH Load Indication Period(s).

If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in time.

This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages.This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH overload messages.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.

None

If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 08.08.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.

The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.

This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS, and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.

For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed.

This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding.

For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, this parameter is invalid. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on the basis of the power level of a TRX.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good.

This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged. Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC, the interference levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. The result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference bands. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted.




None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.

None

None

None

None

None



This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption, the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the MSs can use the DRX function. The period occupied by broadcast short messages that are contained in a dispatching message is called a dispatching period. The description and position of the broadcast short message are contained in the dispatching message in the sending sequence.

This parameter specifies the data service supported. This value of the parameter can be set as required.0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported.0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported.0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported.0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported.0000010000: indicates that only the T9.6K data service is supported.0000100000: indicates that only the T4.8K data service is supported.0001000000: indicates that only the T2.4K data service is supported.0010000000: indicates that only the T1.2K data service is supported.0100000000: indicates that only the T600BITS data service is supported.1000000000: indicates that only the T1200/75 data service is supported.

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. In addition, the BTS transmit power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover. When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive the handover command, thus leading to the call drop.

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference increases. The handover success rate, however, is increased to some extent.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the speech quality is monitored.

For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.

For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.





None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None



This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power.

This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.





None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None




When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in a power control period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH in a power control period.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.

When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter, the power control stops.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control.Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality.

This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 2.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the

quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 1.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.

This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 0. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step.When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

None

None

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%








When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone. Note: The power of the MS and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the level. For details, refer to the Power Control 2nd Generation Control table. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%





If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL Expected Level at HO Access.

This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control.In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. When this parameter is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the receive level value in the history measurement report based on the change of the power. When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained at different transmit power of the BTS/MS. To ensure the accuracy of the values for filtering, the values in the history measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power must be compensated.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report.


On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.





This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.


None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands.


This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of the DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8%Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6%Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2%Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4%Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8%Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the signal quality.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.


This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality.


In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step when RQ is 2.






After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control algorithm implements the prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC samples several downlink measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports from the current time onwards in a short period. This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports predicted by the BSC. The value of this parameter equals to the previous number N. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control algorithm implements the prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC samples several uplink measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports from the current time onwards in a short period. This parameter determines the number of uplink measurement reports predicted by the BSC. In other words, the value of this parameter equals to the previous number N. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

None

This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at different transmit power. To ensure the accuracy of the values for filtering, the values in the history measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power must be compensated.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report.


On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.





This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.


This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei III power control algorithm.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%


When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%







If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%





If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access.

None

This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. None

None

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.


This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases.

This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

This parameter specifies the initial power level. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the output power of the MS increases.

This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH, namely, PCH.When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss.This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105. After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105 by one and resends the downlink data block in which the RRBP field is set. When N3105 overflows, the network initiates the T3195. When the timer T3195 expires, the current TBF abnormally releases.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, and the network still assigns the radio resources to the MS), the network cannot release this TBF, thus wasting the network resources. Based on the actual condition of existing network (for example, the N3105 overflow caused by the bad Um interface quality, the unstable transmission link quality, and the MS activities), you should properly adjust this parameter to ensure the downlink TBF does not abnormally release due to the frequent overflow of the N3105.

This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103. Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete, the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within scheduled time, the N3103 increases by one and the network resends the Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message. When this counter overflows, the network initiates the T3169. When this timer expires, the current TBF abnormally releases.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused by the bad Um interface quality, thus occupying the link resources of system. Based on the actual condition of existing network (for example, the N3101 overflow caused by the bad Um interface quality, the unstable transmission link quality, and the MS activities), you should properly adjust this parameter to ensure the uplink TBF does not abnormally release due to the frequent overflow of the N3101.

This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101. In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if the downlink data blocks carry the USF value. After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping to each USF for the uplink data sent from the MS. If the network receives valid uplink data blocks from the MS, the network resets the N3101; otherwise, the N3101 increases by one. When this counter overflows, the current uplink TBF abnormally releases.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, the network still assigns the uplink resources to the MS), the network cannot release this TBF, thus wasting the network resources. Based on the actual condition of existing network (for example, the N3101 overflow caused by the bad Um interface quality, the unstable transmission link quality, and the MS activities), you should properly adjust this parameter to ensure the uplink TBF does not abnormally release due to the frequent overflow of the N3101.

This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF. After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. Therefore, keep this TBF unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative Reserved Block Period (RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long as the upper layer of the network has a requirement of downlink data transmission, the extracted downlink RLC blocks can be sent on this downlink TBF. At the same time, the status of the downlink TBF changes from release delay to downlink transmission. In addition, during the release delay, the MS must send the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message on the uplink data block corresponding to the RRBP to maintain the communication with the network. Therefore, when the MS needs to send the uplink data, it can send an uplink request through Channel Request Description carried in the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message. The value 0 specifies that release delay function of the downlink TBF is disabled.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, this wastes the wireless resources and influences the the access performance of other MSs in the network, thus causing the useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the delay for the delay tests of the Attach and Ping services. The original downlink TBF is released immediately and cannot be used to transmit subsequent downlink data. Therefore, a new TBF must be established. The original downlink TBF also cannot be used for a new requirement of uplink data transmission. Therefore, the duration and success rate of the TBF establishment are greatly affected.

This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that supports the extended uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink TBF immediately but set it to the inactive mode. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period, the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active instead of establishing a new uplink TBF. When the inactive period expires, if no uplink RLC data block needs to be transmitted, the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ac message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. In addition, when an uplink TBF is inactive, a downlink TBF can still establish on this uplink TBF. The extended uplink TBF function can greatly improve the network KPIs, especially for the discontinuous uplink transmission (such as interactive transmission and Ping) services. The value 0 specifies that the extended uplink TBF function is disabled (Also deactivate this function on the BSC side).

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release delay of the uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the uplink resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the delay for the delay tests of the Attach and Ping services. The most optimized value should be a little greater than the interval between two discontinuous uplink transmissions.

This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0), the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. After the downlink TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the setting time of non-extended uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically release. The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF is disabled.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, this can increase the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH, thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF establishment time; however, if the MS needs to send new uplink data, because the BSC6000 does not support the uplink establishment function on the uplink at present, the reserved uplink TBF must be released and a new TBF must be established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the overall transmission performance decreases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can decrease the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH. The downlink TBF must establish on the CCCH, thus increasing the establishment time.

This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the load-based reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the load-based reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.


This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.


If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of cell reselections decreases.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is allowed.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the probability of the cell reselection decreases.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher value, the decision may not be performed immediately.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is thought to be invalid.

This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.

The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection.

This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.

This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.

If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.

To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.

The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover.This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay class, and throughput class. During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each QoS attribute. After receiving the request from the MS, the network negotiates a class for each attribute of each QoS profile based on the current effective GPRS resources. The network provides the negotiated QoS profile with corresponding resources. Not Support: QoS not supported; Support: QoS supported.

This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain. In version V9R8, the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell, and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell handover, bi-directional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, and no handover between between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell are allowed for the handover between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain; by default, this parameter is set to no handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell.

This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid handover is only allowed.This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services.

The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the ABQP must be lower than the value of this parameter.POC：push to talk over cellular.This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.POC：push to talk over cellular.This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.POC：push to talk over cellular.This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS by interpreting the downlink acknowledgment message from the MS, and assigns the reserved uplink resources to the MS. Then, the MS can send the data blocks.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.

This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, the BSS pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment message to the MS. Upon receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the BTS, the MS can upload the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional channel request message to the BSC. Upon receiving this request message, the BSC sends the additional immediate assignment message to the BTS to complete the setup of the TBF process.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.

None

None

None

None

None

None

When both the MS and the network support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained from the ABQP in the PFC. When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS.Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.PFC: packet flow context.ABQP：Aggregate BSS QoS Profile.This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs.

For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS4.

This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs.

This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected. This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to calculate the measurement results.

The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is; otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is.

This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment, thus improving the quality of links.- Setting and effectLink Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of a channel based on the transmission quality of the channel link. The link quality is determined by 8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP carried in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack message. The network selects a proper coding scheme for transmission based on the measurement reports from the MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA mode is usually used. Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different data blocks with the puncturing coding scheme. The MS buffers the history error information and the data blocks are retransmitted through combined error correction. In the cell with bad Um interface quality, the IR mode can achieve good transmission quality, but the MS must support this mode. For cells with bad Um interface quality, the IR mode is usually used.

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.





This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.





This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.

This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.






This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4.






This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink.If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth.





This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.

This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services.

None

None


This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1).


This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.When a channel is idle, this timer is started. When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services are affected.If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services.

This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels.Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels except for the control channels.Dynamic channels carrying services cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services cannot preempt the dynamic channels that carry services.This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs on the dynamic channel are released.If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be used and the timer is stopped. When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being released. Therefore, the dynamic channel request is sent frequently.

This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.

This parameter is configured according to the congestion counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services.If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell.If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is converted at the OL cell.

This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher.If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is lower.

This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higherIf this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is lower.

This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.

This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.

This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number of TCHs + PDCHs.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS services. If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS services.

This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells

This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is used for cell reselection.

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult for the cell to be selected.If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for the cell to be selected.

None

None

This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.

None

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell.Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.

If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection.

This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not be able to access the channel.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases.

This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.

This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection.Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.

This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas.When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.

In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.Yes: The MS can access another cell. No: The MS cannot access another cell.

This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 10: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.

This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards.c31standard: appliedc31notuse: not appliedThis parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area.When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell reselection not only increases the signaling flow on the network and affects the utilization of radio resources, but also greatly affects the data transmission rate of the MS and decreases the QoS as a consequence. When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell reselection.

In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.

This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.Yes: supportedNo: not supported

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network.

This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time.If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies many resources.

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the access control class. None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access.A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted.If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, the system may be overloaded.







This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS sends a new Channel Request within a long interval after the channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed.If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a new Channel Request within a short interval after the channel request fails, thus accelerating the MS access speed but adding access collisions.

This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests.The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS needs to wait for a long time before sending the next request. This may affect MS services.If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because of transmission delay. In this case, the MS also resends the access request.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.




This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12.Value 1 indicates one PRACH.Value 2 indicates two PRACHs....Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12.Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs....Value 12 indicates four PBCCHs.This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4.Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.

None

This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports.

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell. None

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet transfer mode.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet idle mode.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources.

This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the NC NC-measurement report is sent.The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report is sent.

The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report is sent. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS enters the DRX mode and may send the measurement report frequently.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value indicates a higher access priority.

The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: 1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage, Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value range 0-20 dB is recommended.2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell.

If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.

When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension measurement report is sent frequently.If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement information is not obtained timely.

This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement reportThree types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3.Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC.Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC specified by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC.Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send the measurement report. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and interference measurement of a carrier.This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 of the extension measurement report.

This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap.

The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1.

This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported.Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.

This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.Yes: supportedNo: not supported

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened.

None

None

None

None

None

This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for establishing the TBF for a channel only when the radio priority reaches the access priority of the cell.The values of this parameter area as follows:No packet access Packet access of level 1 Packet access of levels 1-2 Packet access of levels 1-3 Packet access of levels 1-4

This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional.Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is not transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.In the cell reselection required by the network, the network requests the MS to send measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are three network control modes. nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the network and performs automatic cell reselection.nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network but does not perform automatic cell reselection. This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used.

When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing the parameter value improves the transmission rate.When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs.

This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A), the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC.Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used.

PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.

This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS.This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message before T3198 expires, it updates the receive state of each uplink RLC data block based on the acknowledgment bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the RLC data block in the Pending state expires, the MS sets the receive state of this data block to Nack and retransmits the data block.

If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many radio resources are not used but occupied.If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of the sliding window decreases and the probability of the uplink TBF transmission countdown increases, thus decreasing the performance of uplink transmission. To make this value more accurate, you need to estimate the delay in the transmission between the MS and the BSC6 first. This value is set based on the transmission delay.

This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS. If four access pulses are used, the timing advance can be obtained without a polling message.If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.

This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment message.8bit: access using the 8-bit burst11bit: access using the 11-bit burstSI13 indicates the access burst type.

Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. Therefore, 8bit is recommended. This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX

(discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message.The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet transfer mode to the packet idle mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS context. The reservation time depends on the smaller value between DRX_Timer_Max and NON_DRX_TIMER. NON_DRX_TIMER is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS attachment of the MS and its value is usually high. Therefore, the reservation time actually depends on DRX_TIMER_MAX. Value 0 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode immediately.Value 1 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode one second later. Value n indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode n seconds later.

It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in DRX mode. During the period of non-DRX mode, the TBF establishment time decreases, but the power consumption of the MS increases.In DRX mode, the MS monitors paging messages only on the home paging group, and then receives the Immediate Assignment message on all the paging blocks and AGCH reservation blocks. The TBF establishment time increases, but the power consumption of the MS decreases.If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF establishment time increases but the power consumption of the MS decreases. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the TBF establishment time decreases but the power consumption of the MS increases.

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block.When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time.If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds immediately.If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the dedicated mode.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but occupied for a long time.If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period.If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF, thus shortening the TBF establishment time.On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data.On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate.

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message.This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network.If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed.

If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources.If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases.

Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation modes are classified into Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III.When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is used.When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured, Network Operation Mode III is used.

Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs interface or the PCCCH. Therefore, Network Operation Mode II is selected by default.

Documents

2G Huawei NSN parameter mapping.xls